promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 promaster
sixth edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
16VF-126-AF
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................75
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................133
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................225
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................319
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................365
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................427
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................433
10
INDEX .....................................................................445
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents, refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents, refer to the, “What Is Not
Covered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Mechanical Ignition Key Removal ..........12
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ...............14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................14
▫ Replacement Keys .....................15
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................16
▫ Rearming Of The System .................16
▫ To Arm The System .....................16
▫ To Disarm The System...................16
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........17
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................17
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ............18
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................19
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................19
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........19
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement .............19
▫ General Information ....................20
2
䡵 POWER DOOR LOCKS ...................21
▫ Automatic Door Locks ..................23
▫ Auto Unlock Doors ....................23
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................23
▫ Power Windows .......................23
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................25
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........25
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........25
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............25
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................27
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........41
▫ Child Restraints .......................58
▫ Transporting Pets ......................67
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....68
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................68
▫ Transporting Passengers..................68
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................69
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ..........................70
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................73
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains an integrated mechanical key. To
use the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key
release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Mechanical Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical ignition switch.
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
(Continued)
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the
Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all ve-
hicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-
dible and visible signals. For the first three minutes, the
horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the turn signal lights will
flash.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of
turn lamps flashing. If the condition which initiated the
alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condi-
tion and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, the Vehicle Security Alarm will set
when you use the key fob to lock the doors. If a door or
the hood is not properly shut, the alarm system will not
be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the
system.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro-
grammed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition switch.
To exit the alarming mode, push the key fob UNLOCK
button, or insert a programmed Sentry Key into the
ignition switch.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
or manually from the driver door cylinder to unlock the
doors or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position.
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
Key Fob
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on key fob once to
unlock only the front doors. Push and release the CARGO
UNLOCK button on key fob once to unlock the cargo area
(rear lateral sliding doors and rear door). The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the signal; the horn will chirp too during turn signal
lights flashing.
If a door is open, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate, and there will be no horn chirp. This is to
indicate that a door is still open.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-
cated on the side of the key fob.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the key fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Key Fob Screw Location
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The central LOCK/UNLOCK button has an LED that
indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
• LED ON: Doors locked. Push central LOCK/
UNLOCK button once again to centrally unlock all
doors. The LED will switch off.
• LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the central LOCK/
UNLOCK button again to centrally lock all doors. The
doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly
closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob, it will
no longer be possible to unlock them by pushing central
LOCK/UNLOCK button.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the detent.
The load compartment power door lock switch is located
on the driver door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or
unlock the load compartment doors.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
through the EVIC or the Uconnect system.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
NOTE: If the passenger door is open, only the passenger
door is unlocked. This procedure is the same for the rear
and side doors as well.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after
the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Auto-Down Feature
The front window switches are equipped with an Auto-
Down feature. Push the window switch for a short period
of time, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up on the
window switch briefly and release.
NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay
setting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening either of the vehicle’s front doors will cancel this
feature.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open posi-
tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs open the front windows together
to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in a
vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal
for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front outboard passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or down-
ward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push
or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
Adjustable Anchorage
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the
risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring as-
sociated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the
Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bag
system to protect you in a collision. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system is designed to
inflate based on the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts.
Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will
not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that
may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example,
some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of
the SABICs. The trim covering above the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. The
side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags inflate,
even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off safety
switch. In the event of an accident, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Fuel Cut Off
Switch may perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch by following the
procedure described below.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an event
push the “A” Button located underneath the instrument
panel on the passenger side.
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks from
the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch
to avoid the risk of fire. Before resetting the Fuel Cut
Off Switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage
to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights).
Fuel Cut Off Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or
call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small
Children
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Larger
Children
Children who have out-grown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children
Too Large
for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing
child restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt can
be locked to secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation of a
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a child
in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to
secure the child restraint using the seat belt.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured
in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air
bag. In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy
causing severe injury or death to infants riding in
rear-facing infant restraints.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel-
erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................78
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....78
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................78
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ...........79
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped .............79
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............80
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .......80
䡵 SEATS ...............................83
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments ............83
▫ Air Seat — If Equipped .................89
▫ Swivel Seat — If Equipped ...............90
▫ Flap On Bench — If Equipped .............91
▫ Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped ..........................92
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............93
▫ Head Restraints .......................94
▫ Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped .........96
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........97
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................99
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................99
▫ Headlights ...........................99
3
▫ Dimmer Controls .....................100
▫ Ambient Light........................100
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....100
▫ Battery Saver.........................101
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............101
▫ Turn Signals .........................101
▫ Parking Lights .......................101
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................102
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......102
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................102
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........102
▫ Overhead Lights ......................103
▫ Cargo Lamp .........................105
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......106
▫ Windshield Wipers ....................106
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............107
▫ Low Speed ..........................107
▫ High Speed..........................107
▫ Mist Feature .........................107
▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............107
䡵 TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ........108
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........109
▫ To Activate ..........................110
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................110
▫ To Deactivate.........................111
▫ To Resume Speed......................111
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............111
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............113
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................114
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .........114
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts ..........115
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ..........................117
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................117
▫ ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ..........................117
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................119
䡵 OVERHEAD SHELF— IF EQUIPPED ........122
▫ Overhead Lights ......................123
▫ Ambient Light........................124
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED .........125
䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED .....127
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED .........................129
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................129
䡵 STORAGE ............................130
▫ Glove Compartments ..................130
▫ Front Door Storage — If Equipped .........131
▫ Dash Storage ........................131
▫ Dashboard Clipboard ...................132
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................132
▫ CargoArea .........................132
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left
upper, left lower, right upper or right lower mirror
positions indicated by one of the four arrow’s on the
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
switch. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want
the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the
mirror, turn the control to the center position “O” to
prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a power blind
spot mirror, you can adjust them when the control wand
is positioned to the lower arrows.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster button located in the temperature
controls. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located on the
drivers door panel below the power mirror controls.
Power Folding Mirror Switch Location
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will fold in,
push the switch to the left and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
The power fold mirrors are designed to be folded and
unfolded using the power folding switch. If the mirrors
are manually folded, the mirror head may appear loose.
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount of
play, the mirror should be power folded closed, then
power folded open (this may require multiple button
pushes).
NOTE: The intended use of the power fold mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors. Only
manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by accidental
impact. In this case it is possible to restore to position
both ways, manually and electrically (as described
above).
Power Folding Mirror Switch
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
CAUTION!
Leaving the mirror in a non powered position, acci-
dental impact or manual fold, may cause permanent
damage to the mirror. Electrically restore the mirror
to its normal position, as soon as practical.
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward,
rearward, reclined, front and rear height and lumbar
adjustments.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is
located on the rear upper outboard side of the driver’s
seatback. Rotate the control forward to increase and
rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Drivers Seat
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Lumbar Knob
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Height Adjustment (Without Swivel Seat) —
If Equipped
The height adjusting levers are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the front lever to
adjust the front of the seat up or down. Lift up on the rear
lever to adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Levers
1 — Front Height Adjusting Lever
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Height Adjustment (With Swivel Seat) — If Equipped
The height adjusting knobs are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front knob to adjust
the front of the seat up or down. Rotate the rear knob to
adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Knobs
1 — Front Height Adjusting Knob
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Knob
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment — Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seatback, lean back, rotate the knob rear-
ward to position the seatback as desired. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward,
rotate the knob forward until the seatback is in the
upright position.
Recliner Knob
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Recliner Adjustment — With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front outboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lean forward
slightly, pull the lever outward, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and pull the lever
outward. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Recliner Lever
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Air Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system
and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum com-
fort and safety. The system of springs also effectively
absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces.
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob to set the required
setting based on body weight, with settings between
88 lbs (40 kg) and 286 lbs (130 kg).
Weight Adjustment Knob
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front inboard
side of the seat. The seat may be turned through 180°
toward the seat on the opposite side and approximately
35° toward the door. The seat may be locked in the
driving position or at the 180° position. To swivel the
seat, pull the swivel seat inboard lever outward, turn the
seat to the desired position and release the lever. The
swivel seat back lever is located at the lower front
outboard side of the seat, to tilt the seat back forward or
rearward.
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel seats,
the seats must be locked in facing forward position while
driving. If the seats are not in the correct position, a
warning will display in the EVIC.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in
facing forward position before the first vehicle move-
ment, shifting out of park is not allowed until the seats
are both locked in facing forward position. When the
seats are not in the right position and the first vehicle
movement after the cranking is attempted, a chime and a
text message will appear in EVIC. Rotate and lock the
swivel seats in the correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in
facing forward position during movement of the vehicle,
a message will be visualized in the EVIC and an inter-
mittent chime will sound until key-off or until the swivel
seats are locked in facing forward position. Stop and
move the swivel seats in the correct position before
proceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not possible to
check the correct position of the swivel seats, a message
and the generic warning light appears in the EVIC to
inform about the failure. In these conditions, check the
status of the swivel seats and not drive the vehicle until
the swivel seats are locked in facing forward position.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flap On Bench — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the seat is
equipped with a fold-down flap that can be used as a
document support surface. To use the fold-down flap,
grasp the pull tab and lower the flap.
Swivel Seat Lever
Fold-Down Flap Pull Tab
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
The fold-down flap is equipped with two cup holders
and a support surface with a paper holder clip.
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) —
If Equipped
A storage tray is located under the drivers seat that can
be easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the
support base.
Fold-Down Flap
Underseat Storage Tray
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the
switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located on the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and adjusted
for height. Underneath the front of the armrest is the
adjuster wheel which will adjust the height of the armrest
up or down.
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
Adjuster Wheel
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Open the drivers door to gain access to the hood
release lever. Pull the hood release lever located on the
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push the
safety latch lever to the right to release it, before
raising the hood.
Hood Release
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood
slot to secure the hood in the open position.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection and the passing lights. The multifunction lever
is located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light, the clear-
ance lights and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever back to the O (Off) position.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of the
instrument panel below the instrument cluster.
Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or decrease
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the dome
lamp, the ambient light will be on all the time with the
option of dimming it with the dimmer controls.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O (Off) position.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be
ON or OFF through the Uconnect system screen if
equipped, or through the instrument clusters menu.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” or “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Dimmer Controls
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is ON, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, and the turn signal is off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery when the
ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 15 minutes the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
climate controls. Push the switch once to turn
the fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn
the fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in
the STOP position or removed, by moving the end of the
multifunction lever to O (off) position and then to the
headlight position.
The warning light telltale in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever a second time to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
The warning light on the instrument panel will light up
and the corresponding message will appear in the EVIC
display for as long as the function is activated. The
warning light comes on when the lever is operated and
stays on until the function is automatically deactivated.
Each movement of the lever only increases the amount of
time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead shelf. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Overhead Lights
1 — Left Map Light
2 — Right Map Light
3 — On/Right Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Off/Left Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different positions
(Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console:
• Push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
• Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
• Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights
are turned on and off when the doors are opened or
closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Push the switch on the right to turn the right light on and
push the switch on the left to turn the left light on.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Lamp
The Rear Cargo Lamp is located at the upper rear cargo
area above the rear doors.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Side Cargo Lamp
located at the upper rear area of the passenger side
sliding door opening.
Rear Cargo Lamp
Side Cargo Lamp
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
The Cargo Lamps can be set to three different positions
(Off/Right Position, Center Position, On/Left Position).
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the right from its center
position and the lamp is always off.
• Leave the Cargo Lamp lens in the center position, and
the lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed.
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the left from its center
position and the lamp is always on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. There are five different
modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The
windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access
the modes.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Push the lever downward to the first detent and rotate
the center ring to use one of the four intermittent wiper
settings when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers.
The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles
after the lever is released. and then resume the intermit-
tent interval previously selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for three cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The telescoping control handle is lo-
cated below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
up. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle down until fully engaged.
Telescoping Control Handle
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control Lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by rotating the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF center ring and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Rotate the center ring upward on the electronic speed
control lever to turn the system ON. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn
the system OFF, rotate the center ring upward a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, move the electronic speed
control lever upward SET(+) and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before moving the electronic speed
control lever upward SET(+).
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RES button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Rotating the center ring upward to
turn the system OFF or turning the ignition switch OFF
erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by tapping the Speed Control lever up (+).
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant
on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the lever results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease
speed by tapping the Speed Control lever down (-).
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant
on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides an
audible indication of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up,
e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense
System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automatically acti-
vated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle de-
creases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches
(140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and
up to 24 inches (60 cm) from the corners of the rear
fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the vehicle during the parking
maneuver.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle.
A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 inches (30 cm) away.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’ field
of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the
distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable through
personal settings in the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on multifunction display
(where provided).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors
or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engage-
ment, by the instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the Instrument Cluster Display
shall indicate that the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure
condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system
must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
Clean the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping
the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4
inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE and/or when the
rear doors are opened. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the top
rear of the vehicle below the center light.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or
when the rear doors are closed, the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
NOTE: ParkView Rear Back Up Camera can be enabled
or disabled by Uconnect system menu.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD SHELF— IF EQUIPPED
The overhead shelf is located on the headliner above the
review mirror. The overhead console contains the follow-
ing features:
• Automatic Dome Lights
• Dome Lights
• Map Lights
• Ambient Light
NOTE: For additional information on the light function,
refer to “Lights” in this chapter for further information.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead shelf. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Overhead Lights
1 — Left Map Light
2 — Right Map Light
3 — On/Right Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Off/Left Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different positions
(Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console:
• Push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
• Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
• Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights
are turned on and off when the doors are opened or
closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Push the switch on the right to turn the right light on and
push the switch on the left to turn the left light on.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on the dome
lamp, the ambient light will be on all the time with the
option of dimming it with the dimmer controls.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The cigar lighter and the power outlet are located in the
center console. It only operates with the ignition key at
MAR/ON.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the
left rear side of the rear cargo compartment. The outlet
can be is used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories
and recharging communications devices.
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
Load Compartment Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F14 Fuse 20 A Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 A Blue Rear Power Outlet
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary
switches located on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering column which can be used to power various
electronic devices.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Connections to the switches are found in the right central
pillar fuse panel at the base of the passenger side B pillar.
Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant battery feed,
while Auxiliary Switch 2 is configured to ignition feed.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
Auxiliary Upfitter Switches
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —
IF EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
CUPHOLDERS
The cupholders for the drivers and passenger area are
located near the floor just under the center stack storage
compartment. There are cupholders located in each door
panel as well as one single cupholder located to the right
of the manual climate controls.
Optional Ash Receiver And Cigar Lighter
Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments are located on the right side of
the instrument panel.
Glove Compartments
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders are located in both the
front door trim panels.
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Front Door Storage Dash Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Dashboard Clipboard
Located on top of the dashboard is a clipboard and two
storage bins on each side of the clipboard.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area
The cargo area may be equipped with different options
such as a optional side panels, rear seats and an optional
floor.
Clipboard And Storage Bins
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........136
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................137
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......140
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............141
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............152
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............164
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............166
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............167
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) ........................167
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................169
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........171
▫ Trip Computer .......................172
▫ Trip Button ..........................172
▫ Trip Functions .......................173
▫ Values Displayed ......................174
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) ........175
4
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................176
䡵 UCONNECT RH3.......................177
▫ Introduction .........................177
▫ Recommendations .....................178
▫ Identification Number ..................179
▫ Security Code ........................179
▫ General.............................180
▫ Uconnect RH3 Display ..................181
▫ General Functions And Settings ...........182
▫ Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio) .............185
▫ Setup Menu .........................188
▫ Clock ..............................189
▫ USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC) ...........189
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................197
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................198
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............199
▫ Customer Programmable Features/
Personal Settings ......................199
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS ...................206
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .207
▫ USB Charging Port ....................208
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......209
▫ Radio Operation ......................210
䡵 CD DISC MAINTENANCE ...............210
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .211
▫ General Information ...................211
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................212
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......212
䡵 UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................218
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................218
▫ Get Started ..........................219
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................220
▫ Radio ..............................221
▫ Media..............................222
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................223
▫ Additional Information .................224
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Panel Features Will Vary As Equipped
1 — Air Outlet 10 — Lower Glove Compartment 19 — Uconnect Phone Buttons
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 11 — Cup Holder 20 — Tilt Steering Column Release Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster 12 — USB Charger/12V 21 — Horn
4 — Multifunction Lever (Front Wiper,
Trip Computer)
13 — Climate Controls 22 — Mute/Uconnect Voice Command
Buttons
5 — Radio (As Equipped) 14 — Lower Switch Ban 23 — Cruise Control Switches
6 — Clip Board 15 — Cup Holders 24 — Fuse Box Lid
7 — Upper Glove Compartment 16 — Gear Selector 25 — Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Controls
8 — Passenger Air Bag 17 — USB / AUX 26 — Hood Release
9 — Storage Compartment 18 — Ignition Switch
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service.
It is a good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
reset at zero.
• Gear Selector Status (PRND)
The gear selector status “P,R,N,D,1,2,3,4,5,6” are dis-
played indicating the gear selector position. Telltales
“1,2,3,4,5,6” indicate the manual mode has been
engaged and the gear selected is displayed. Refer to
“Six-Speed Automatic Transmission” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information on ERS.
3. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Door Open Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely
and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually
be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the EVIC Display and a buzzer) to
indicate a transmission fault. This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle
speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine speed RPM until the Transmission
Temperature light turns off. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
As the coolant temperature gauge approaches ⬙H,⬙ a Red Dot lamp located to the left of
the “H” will illuminate and a single chime will sound. Further overheating will cause the
temperature gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, a continuous chime will sound until the engine
is allowed to cool or the 4 minute duration is expired, whichever comes first.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The
light should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied
with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a failure to one of the following
lights is detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
• Daytime Running Lights
• Clearance Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow
Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes on in
the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked,
try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is running a
self-test (for example for a voltage drop).
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indica-
tor is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
function telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
manually turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds and flash the ESC activation light
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems.
The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead
to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Generic Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Generic Warning Indicator Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off
Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
instrument panel.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
• (*)
just available after SBR disable made by CHR Service
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (if equipped)
• Exit Menu
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering column:
EVIC Control Buttons
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• MODE Button
Push and hold the MODE button for a time longer than
1 second to access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MODE button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus or adjust the illumination on the instru-
ment panel when the headlights are on.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus or adjust the illumination on the
instrument panel when the headlights are on.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button to access the different options and settings
(setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MODE
button. Single pushes on the UP
or DOWN arrow
button will scroll through the setup menu options. The
menu items include the following functions:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Data
• Autoclose
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
• (*)
just available after SBR disable made by CHR Service
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Lights (if equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect 5.0 radio, some customer
programmable features will display in the Uconnect
5.0 system. Refer to the radio supplement for further
Uconnect 5.0 information.
• The EVIC clock setting and Uconnect 5.0 clock set-
ting procedure can be done through the radio or the
EVIC.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to scroll through all the
submenu options.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-
evant setup menu.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new setting
for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the MODE button to return
to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen
(longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the EVIC display. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 99999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance A
• Average consumption
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average consumption
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating to:
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption”
cannot be reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel con-
sumption since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Data
• Autoclose
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
• (*)
just available after SBR disable made by CHR Service
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (if equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect 5.0/5.0N radio, some
customer programmable features will display in the
Uconnect 5.0/5.0N system. Refer to the Uconnect
Settings for further Uconnect 5.0/5.0N information.
• The EVIC clock setting and Uconnect 5.0/5.0N clock
setting procedure can be done through the radio or
the EVIC.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features
to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft-
ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US
LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro-
priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your systems or to
reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-
agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT RH3
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with a radio that has an
AM/FM radio receiver and a USB port for playing MP3,
WMA and AAC files. The device has been designed
according to the specific characteristics of the vehicle,
with a design matching the style of the instrument panel.
The radio is installed in an ergonomic position for the
driver and passenger with a diagram on the front panel
that allows the user commands to be identified quickly
and easily.
The directions for use are described below, and we advise
you to read these carefully.
NOTE: The operation of many of the resources men-
tioned in this publication depends on technology used by
radio stations and other base stations, which may not be
available at certain times and/or in particular locations.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Recommendations
Road Safety
We recommend that you learn how to use the various
radio features (for example, Station Preset) before you
begin your journey.
WARNING!
Turning the volume up too high may be dangerous
for the driver and other people on the road. You
should adjust the volume so that you are always able
to hear sounds around you (e.g. horns, ambulances,
police cars, etc.).
Radio Reception
Reception varies constantly while driving.
Reception may be affected by mountains, buildings or
bridges, especially when further away from the transmit-
ter of the tuned radio station.
CAUTION!
When listening to traffic news, you may notice
louder volume compared to normal playback.
Care And Maintenance
The radio structure is built to guarantee many years of
operation without needing maintenance. In case of a
fault, contact your local authorized dealer.
Use only a soft, anti-static cloth to clean the front of the radio.
Detergents and waxes can damage the surface.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Identification Number
The radio has a unique identification number (found on
the warranty card). This card is required as proof of
ownership if the radio is stolen or when seeking assis-
tance. Do not store the warranty card in the vehicle.
Security Code
This radio has a serial number (found on the ⬙warranty
card⬙).
Present this card as proof of ownership if the radio is
stolen or if you require assistance.
Do not store the warranty card in the vehicle.
If the electrical supply is disrupted, the unit will mute
and the display will show ⬙0000⬙ to indicate that you can
enter the security code.
You must enter the security (shown on the ⬙warranty
card⬙, for example, 4359) code as follows:
Action Display
When you turn the radio on, the dis-
play shows ⬙0000⬙.
0000
Push the number 1 preset button un-
til the first digit of the code number
is displayed.
4---
Push the number 2 preset button un-
til the second digit of the code num-
ber is displayed.
40--
Push the number 3 preset button un-
til the third digit of the code number
is displayed.
43--
Push the number 4 preset button un-
til the fourth digit of the code num-
ber is displayed.
430-
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Action Display
When you finish entering the code,
push the POWER button to accept
the code entered.
4359
If you enter the correct code, the radio will start as
normal in radio mode (TUNER). If you enter the wrong
code, the radio will remain locked until disconnected
from the power supply.
If the car radio power supply is disconnected for approxi-
mately eight seconds or longer, you will again be asked
for the security code when it is reconnected.
General
The radio offers the following features:
Radio (Tuner Mode)
• Automatic/Manual station tuning
• Manual storage of 30 stations: 18 in the FM band (6 in
FM1, 6 in FM2 and 6 in FM3), 6 in the AM1 band and
6 in the AM2 band
• Best stations memory
MP3/WMA/AAC (USB Mode)
• “Last position” memory
• MP3/WMA/AAC track selection (forward/reverse)
• MP3/WMA/AAC track fast forward/reverse
• (RND) RaNDom (music shuffle) function
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General
• Separate BASS and TREBLE settings
• BALANCE/FADE (balances left/right and front/rear
channels)
• Equalizer
• Loudness
• Digital clock in 24-hour format with weekday setting
• Illuminated buttons and display
• LCD display
• Extended functions field (Setup MENU) allows you to
change the default settings
Uconnect RH3 Display
RH3 Display Panel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Description Of Commands
Rotary Knob: Turn radio on and off, volume, forward/
reverse track, confirm selected option.
䉴䉴 And 䉳䉳 Buttons: Station search in automatic mode,
station search in manual mode, forward/reverse tracks,
forward/reverse within track.
Mute/Pause Button: Interrupts the sound by muting or
pausing the audio.
DISP Button: Switches between display modes, clock
display.
RND Button: Enables/Disables shuffle play.
SRC Button: Switches the audio source to TUNER.
Switches the audio source to USB.
Fast Track Buttons (F-Trk): Fast forward/reverse track
(used with the ROTARY knob).
Audio Button: Activates audio setting functions.
Preset Buttons (1 To 6): Store station in memory, access
preset stations.
Buttons 1 And 2: Forward/reverse folder.
Band/AS Button: Select tuned frequency band, preset
best stations.
Menu Button: Access setup menu.
General Functions And Settings
Turn The Radio On Or Off
To turn the radio on or off, push the ROTARY knob (push
once to turn on and hold for about three seconds to turn
off), not dependent on the ignition position.
The default radio configuration is “Auto Switch ON⬙ (see
SETUP MENU section). In this configuration, the radio
will follow two parameters: ignition and previous state.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ignition is turned off with the radio on, the radio
will be turned off, but will come on again when the
ignition is turned on. If the ignition is turned off with the
radio off, the radio continues to be turned off when the
ignition is turned on again.
If you prefer, you can set ⬙Auto Switch OFF⬙ (see SETUP
MENU section). The radio will only consider the ignition
switch position when it executes the 60 min function:
when the ignition is turned off, the radio will display the
message ⬙60 MIN⬙ for three seconds and switch off
automatically after 60 minutes if no buttons are pushed.
When it is turned on, the radio will display a greeting
message. When it is turned off, the radio will display the
message ⬙GOOD BYE⬙ before it switches off.
Audio
You can use the AUDIO button to access the available
audio settings (described in the sections below).
Equalizer
Pushing the AUDIO button for more than two seconds
activates the audio equalizer functions in the following
sequence: FLAT
POP ROCK CLASSIC
VOCAL JAZZ USER FLAT. Push AUDIO
repeatedly to change the equalization. If this button is
not pushed again within five seconds, or if you push
the ROTARY knob, the display returns to the previ-
ously selected view and the settings will be saved.
Custom Audio Setting Functions
Push the AUDIO button for less than two seconds to
activate the Balance function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Repeatedly pushing the AUDIO button activates the
other custom audio setting functions in the following
sequence: Bass
Treble Balance Fader Loud-
ness Bass. If this button is not pushed again within
five seconds, or if you push the ROTARY knob, the
display returns to the previously selected view and the
settings will be saved. USER equalization must be
selected to activate the Bass and Treble functions.
Bass
The display will show ⬙BASS 00⬙ to indicate that the Bass
function can be set. To increase the bass level, turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the bass level, turn
the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The bass levels can
be set between -15 and 15.
Treble
The display will show ⬙TREB 00⬙ to indicate that the
Treble function can be set. To increase the treble level,
turn the ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the treble
level, turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The
treble levels can be set between -15 and 15.
Balance
The display will show the message ⬙BAL 00⬙ to indicate
that the balance function can be set. Turn the ROTARY
knob clockwise to transfer the sound to the right-hand
side; the display will show ⬙BAL R 01⬙. Turn the ROTARY
knob counterclockwise to transfer the sound to the
left-hand side; the display will show ⬙BALL01⬙. The
balance levels can be set between 0 and 15.
Fader
The display will show ⬙FAD 00⬙ to indicate that you can
set the Fader function. Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise
to transfer the sound to the front; the display will show
⬙FADF01⬙. Turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise to
transfer the sound to the back; the display will show
⬙FADR01⬙. The fader levels are set from 0 to 15.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loudness
The display will show ⬙LOUD 00⬙ to indicate that you can
set the loudness (enhanced sound) function. Turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise to enable the loudness function
at level 1; the display will show ⬙LOUD 01⬙ and the
LOUD flag will be enabled. The radio supports three
loudness levels.
Volume
Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise to increase the vol-
ume. Turning it counterclockwise will lower the volume.
The volume can be set between 0 and 30.
Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio)
When you enter TUNER mode, the radio tunes to the
most recently selected station and will remain on the
most recently selected frequency band.
In this mode of operation the display will show one of the
following 5 codes:
CH (Channel)
When this is on, it indicates that the current radio station
preset is stored in memory. The code is only shown when
the tuned frequency is showing on the display.
ST (Stereo)
When this is on, it indicates the radio station is transmitting.
Searching for Stations In Automatic Mode
When you push
or for less than two seconds, the
radio will search for the next valid station. While the
radio is searching for the new station, the display will
show ⬙SEEKING⬙. When the search is complete, the
display will show the tuned frequency band and
station in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ or, if the station was
previously stored in memory, the display will show
the channel where it is stored and the tuned station.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Searching for Stations In Manual Mode
Pushing
or for more than two seconds displays
the selected radio station frequency. Each time a
button is pushed, the radio station frequency is in-
creased or decreased according to the default search
pattern for the selected band (100 kHz for FM and 10k
Hz for AM). When the search button is pushed and
held, the radio station frequency will continue to be
increased or decreased. If the buttons are not pushed
for five seconds, the display will show the message
⬙AUTO⬙ and manual search mode will be canceled.
When the search is complete, the display will show the
tuned band and station in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙,or,if
the station found was previously stored in memory,
the display will show the channel where it is stored
and the tuned station.
Mute/Pause
Pushing this button mutes the sound. The display will
switch between ⬙MUTE ON⬙ and the previous display (3
seconds).
Pushing the button again restores the audio without
changing the original volume setting. The display will
show ⬙MUTE OFF⬙ for three seconds, and then return to
the previous display mode.
When the
or , Audio, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, BAND/AS
buttons and SRC are pushed in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode,
these will be implemented and the audio will be
restored without changing the original volume.
Turn the ROTARY knob to restore the audio and change
the volume to the level selected. The display will show
the settings described in the volume function.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙MUTE ON⬙ mode.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Storing Stations In Memory
Push and hold the memory buttons (1 through 6) for
more than two seconds to associate the tuned station
with the pushed button. The display will show a message
in ⬙MEMO 2⬙ format for three seconds to confirm that the
station has been tuned in. The CH signal is then activated
and the display will show the preset number and station
frequency for three seconds ⬙2 106.9⬙. The display will
then return to the previous view.
Accessing Preset Stations
When the preset buttons (1 through 6) are pushed for less
than two seconds the radio will tune in to the station
associated with that particular memory location. The
display shows the preset number and frequency of the
associated station for three seconds. The display will then
return to the previous view.
Retuning the band: When the BAND/AS button is
pushed for less than two seconds, the radio will alternate
between bands in the sequence: FM1
FM2 FM3
AM1 AM2 FM1. While changing bands from
the FM3 band to
AM1, the display will show ⬙AM⬙
for two seconds and when changing from the AM2
band to
FM1, the display will show ⬙FM⬙ for two
seconds.
The display will then show the selected band and fre-
quency in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ for two seconds and then
return to the previous view.
Presetting stations with a strong signal: when the
BAND/AS button is pushed for more than two seconds,
the radio will search for the 6 best stations and automati-
cally store them in the 6 memory positions of the current
band. During the search, the display will indicate ⬙FM
AST⬙ or ⬙AM AST⬙, depending on the band selected. To
record the stations that are found, these are sorted in
ascending order of frequency and the first one is stored in
memory position 1, and so on, until positions 1-6 are all
in use. If fewer than 6 stations are found, the unused
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
channels will be allocated to the 107.9 MHz frequency for
FM and AM 1710 KHz for the AM band. At the end of the
search process, the radio tunes in to the first preset
position and the display will indicate the associated
preset number (1) and the station frequency for three
seconds. The display will then return to the previous
view.
Setup Menu
You can use the Setup menu to change the various factory
settings to suit your own preferences.
Push MENU to activate the Maximum Volume function.
Repeatedly pushing this button will activate the other
functions in the following sequence: Maximum Volume
(MVOL)
Auto Switch (AUTO) Beep (BEEP)
Set Clock Maximum Volume (MVOL). If this
button or the button for adjusting the selected function
is not pushed for five seconds or if the ROTARY knob
is pushed, the display returns to the previous view
and the changes will be saved.
Maximum Volume
This function allows you to set the maximum permissible
volume. Turn the ROTARY knob to set the volume. The
display will show a message in the format ⬙MVOL 26⬙
indicating the maximum volume selected. When the
maximum volume selected is the maximum radio vol-
ume, the display will show ⬙MVOL OFF⬙.
Auto Switch
This function changes the on/off sequence of the radio as
described in the section: ⬙Turning the device on and off.⬙
To enable it, turn the ROTARY knob clockwise. The
display will show ⬙AUTO ON⬙. To disable it, turn the
ROTARY knob counterclockwise and the display will
show ⬙AUTO OFF⬙.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Beep
With this feature is enabled, the radio will emit a beep
when any knob is activated.
Clock settings
When you select this function, the display will show the
clock. To select the field to be set, push
or . Turn
the ROTARY knob to adjust the selected field.
Clock
Pushing the DISP button for more than two seconds
enables or disables the clock display. When this feature is
enabled, the display shows ⬙CLK ON⬙ and the clock is
displayed whenever the ignition is switched on, even if
the radio is off. This function takes priority in the display
whenever you access any of the radio functions. If no
buttons are pushed within 10 seconds, the display will go
back to showing the clock. When this function is dis-
abled, the display shows ⬙CLK OFF⬙.
USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC)
CAUTION!
To remove devices connected to the USB port, first
select the other audio source. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause damage to the connected device.
Due to the extensive range of makes and models of
storage devices available on the market, not all
devices have compatibility required for proper func-
tioning of Car Radios. Use only quality USB devices.
Due to the extensive range of brands and models of
storage devices available on the market, not all devices
are compatible with proper functioning of the car radio.
NOTE: The car radio is only compatible with USB mass
storage devices that are fully compatible with the USB 2.0
standard. Use quality USB devices only.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
In USB mode, the radio plays MP3, WMA and AAC files
stored on the device connected to the USB port that is
located on the lower right side of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
To enter USB mode, you must push the SRC button.
When you enter USB mode, the display shows ⬙LOAD-
ING⬙ while the radio checks whether the connected
device is valid.
If there is no USB device, an invalid USB device, or a
valid device that is defective, the display will show ⬙ERR
USB⬙ for two seconds and the radio remains in TUNER
mode. If a valid device does not contain any playable
files (i.e. MP3, WMA or AAC), the display will show ⬙NO
MUSIC⬙ for two seconds and the radio remains in
TUNER mode.
If playable files are found, the radio will also check that
the connected device is the same as the one used imme-
diately before the USB function. If this is the case, music
playback will start from the point where it was inter-
rupted (file and music runtime). If not, the file played
will be the first valid file, in the sequence shown in the
following example:
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
File Sequence
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Play Sequence (File) Comments
1 Track 1_1 If there are MP3, WMA or AAC (extensions mp3, wma, m4a, mp4 and 3gp)
files in the root folder, these will be played first.
2 Track 2_1 Folders within the same level are sorted in ascending order by name (up to
folder number 100, after which the order follows that in which they were
recorded on the USB device).
3 Track 3_1
4 Track 4_1
5 Track 4_2
6 Track 5_1 Files within a folder are sorted in ascending order by name (up to file number
100, thereafter, the order follows that in which they were recorded on the USB
device).
7 Track 5_2
8 Track 5_3
9 Track 5_4
10 Track 6_1
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Forward/Reverse Track
When you push
for less than two seconds, the radio
will advance to the next audio file on the device. When
you push
for less than two seconds, the radio will
skip back to the beginning of the track. If this button is
pushed again, the radio will skip back to the previous
audio file on the device.
When these buttons are pushed, the display will show a
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number. If any
of these buttons is briefly pushed again, the number in
the display will continue changing according to the
selected track. While the track is being selected, that is,
when
or are pushed briefly, the information
contained in the ID3 tag will not be processed (the ID3
tag can store information such as the title, artist,
album, track number, etc.). If neither
or are
pushed down and held, the track will be selected and
the ID3 tag will be processed and begin playing. In
this case, the display will show ⬙TRKyyy⬙ for two
seconds and then return to the DISP function view.
Whenever the radio switches from one folder to
another, the display will show the name of the folder
you are moving to for at least 500 ms (seek button
movements are ignored during this time), and no
longer than three seconds.
When you reach the final song in the last folder and push
again, the radio will advance to the first song in the
first folder on the USB device. When you reach the
first song in the first folder and push
again, the
radio will advance to the final song in the last folder
on the USB device.
Forward/Reverse Along The Track:
When
or is pushed for more than two seconds,
the radio will reverse or forward the music for as long
as the button is held down. The display shows the
runtime of the music in the format ⬙003 01:32⬙ (track
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
number and runtime). When the operation is com-
pleted, the display will continue to display the music
runtime for two seconds. After that it returns to the
previous view.
Mute/Pause
Pushing this knob stops music playback and mutes the
sound. The display will switch between ⬙PAUSED⬙ and
the current view (three seconds).
Push this button again to resume music playback from
the point where it left off, without changing the original
volume level. The display will show ⬙PLAY⬙ for three
seconds. It then returns to the previous mode.
When
or , Audio, 1, 2, and SRC are pushed in
⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode, playback (where applicable)
will resume and the sound will be restored without
changing the original volume level.
Turn the ROTARY knob to resume playing the music and
change the volume accordingly. The display will feature
the information described in the volume function.
Pushing the F-TRACK button will not resume play, but
using the (F-TRK + rotation) function will start or resume
play.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode.
Fast Track: Pushing the F-TRK button activates FAST
TRACK mode and the display will show the name of the
current folder. If the ROTARY knob is not activated, the
radio returns to its previous state.
If the ROTARY knob is turned, the display shows the
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number.
Turning the knob clockwise will forwards the tracks and
turning it counterclockwise will reverse the tracks. While
this is being performed, the information contained in the
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 tag is not processed. As the knob is turned, the
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message changes to the track selected.
When the ROTARY knob is pushed or if its position is not
changed for five seconds, the track is selected, the ID3 tag
is processed and the music will start playing. In this case,
the display will show the ⬙TRKyyy⬙ message for two
seconds and then return to the default display defined by
the DISP function.
When the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
moving for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three
seconds. When you reach the final track in the last folder
and turn the ROTARY knob clockwise, the radio will
advance to the first track in the first folder on the USB
device. When you reach the first track in the first folder
and turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise, the radio
will advance to the last track in the last folder on the USB
device.
Forward/Reverse Folder
When you push the memory 1 button, the radio will
advance to the first track in the next folder containing
audio files, if you push button 2, the radio will return to
the first track in the previous folder containing audio
files.
When this operation is complete, the display shows the
name of the selected folder. If you push any of these
buttons again quickly, the name shown is updated as you
select folders on the USB device. While the track is being
selected, that is, when you push buttons 1 or 2 quickly,
the information contained in ID3 tag is not processed. If
you do not push and hold 1 or 2, the track is selected, the
ID3 tag is processed and the music will start playing. In
this case, the display will continue showing the name of
the selected folder for two seconds and then return to the
default display defined by the DISP function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Whenever the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
going for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three
seconds. When you reach the last folder and push Button
1 again, the radio will advance to the next folder on the
USB device. When you reach the first folder and push
Button 2 again, the radio will advance to the next folder
on the USB device.
Shuffle (Random Playback)
Pushing the RND button enables or disables the ⬙shuffle⬙
feature. When enabled, the RND indicator is switched on
and the display will show ⬙RND ON⬙ for two seconds.
The display will then revert to the previous view.
When you push this button again, the function is dis-
abled, the RND indicator is turned off and the display
will show ⬙RND OFF⬙ for two seconds. The display then
reverts to the previous view.
If the RND function is enabled, the music forward/
reverse will be random, both in normal mode and Fast
Track mode. In this case, Buttons 1 and 2 (forward/
reverse folder) have the exact same function as
or
(music forward/reverse), respectively.
Switching Between Display Modes
When you push the DISP button for less than two
seconds, information about the track being played will
alternate in the following sequence: Track
Time
Title Album Artist File Folder
Track. At the first touch of the button, the display
now shows the information type related to the track
being played, for example, if the current information is
track, the display will show ⬙TIME⬙. If you push any
other buttons or if the DISP button is not pushed for
two seconds, the information type that is on the
display will be selected. When the file that is being
played does not contain the selected information, the
radio will display ⬙NO NAME.⬙
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 5.0N Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped),
Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
Press the display mode button to set the display bright-
ness according to manual or auto condition. In auto mode
the display brightness is aligned to that of the instrument
panel.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
This feature is only available in manual display mode.
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
This feature is only available in manual display mode.
• Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of multiple lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press
the desired language button. The button will highlight
showing that setting has been selected. Press the arrow
back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. To
make your selection, press the “Touchscreen Beep” but-
ton on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The
button will highlight indicating that the setting has been
selected.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Trip B
Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the dis-
playing of the Trip B on the instrument panel display.
• Units — If Equipped
Press the Units button to select the correct unit for
Temperature (°F or °C), Distance (mi or km) and Fuel
Consumption. If the distance is in mi (miles), miles per
gallon (mpg) are set automatically. If the distance
is km, km/1 or 1/100km can be selected.
• Voice Response Length
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected.
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped With Naviga-
tion
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen. The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button. The button will
highlight showing that setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
• Time and Format
This feature will allow you to set the time and choose the
format to display the time. To make your selection, press
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust the hours/minutes up or down. To select format
press the 12h/24h AM and/or PM button on the touch-
screen. The button will highlight showing that setting has
been selected. If 24h is selected, the AM/PM buttons on
the touchscreen will be greyed out (unavailable). Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu or press the ”X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
• Set Date
This feature will allow you to set the date manually. Press
the Set Date button on the touchscreen and using the
“Up” and “Down” arrows, set the date.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. When
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear view
image will display for no more than ten seconds and after
the radio screen will appear.
To make your selection, press the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance settings.
Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust,
or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the center.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “–” or “+” arrow
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the Up and Down arrow buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button
will highlight indicating that the setting has been se-
lected.
• Auto - On Radio
Press the Auto On Radio button on the touchscreen to set
how the radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to
On. The options are: ON, Off or Recall Last.
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Radio Off Delay
Press the Radio Off Delay to keep the radio On for a
preset amount of time after the Ignition is switched Off.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones and Audio Sources
This feature shows which phones or and audio devices
are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement .
• Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This feature shows the call information in the Instrument
Cluster Display. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement .
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the back-
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touch-
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec-
tion, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen,
select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Port and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel left of the radio (driver’s lower right).
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port 2 — AUX Audio Jack
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for charging pur-
poses only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod
or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging port
which is located next to the 12V power outlet near the
cup holder on passenger side.
NOTE: If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
Passenger Compartment USB Charging Port
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch and con-
trols the SCAN functions of the sound system.
Remote Sound System Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch and controls
the volume of the sound system plus a button to mute the
Sound System.
The following describes the right-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Scan” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Scan” down for the next listenable station.
CD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g, scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down
or off during mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
three outer rotary dials (blower speed, temperature and
mode) and three inner push buttons (Recirculation, A/C,
Rear Window Defroster).
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Manual Temperature Controls
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Air Conditioning Control
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
• Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the
temperature control to the desired temperature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pushing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Ex-
tended use of this mode is not recommended.
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside
air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the
Recirculation button is pushed while in Defrost mode,
the LED indicator will flash several times then go out.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically when
Defrost mode is selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
If the following conditions are verified:
• Mode Floor, Vent or Bi level selected.
• Temperature in Max Cold.
• A/C led ON.
• Hot Ambient Temperature.
• Blower at Maximum speed.
• In case of hot ambient temperature, the recirculation is
closed (opened for a minute each 15 minutes so the air
can be changed) to improve the vehicle cooling.
Rear Window Defrosting — If Equipped
Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear
window defrosting.
This function switches OFF automatically after about
20 minutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not
switched on automatically the next time the engine is
started.
If equipped, push the Rear Defrost button to activate
defrosting of door mirrors and heated nozzles.
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
This switch, mounted on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering column, activates the additional rear
heating/air conditioning system vent.
NOTE: The switch must be enabled for operation by the
Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Control Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)
Uconnect 5.0
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
1.
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and fea-
ture compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2.
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversa-
tions are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in
the dome lamp and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a
Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or
Receive A Text
3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
4 — Push To End Call
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0 VR
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the PHONE button
. After the beep, say...
“Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me. Are you
there yet?
I’ll call
you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit
DriveUconnect.com.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................228
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....228
▫ Normal Starting.......................228
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................229
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................229
▫ After Starting ........................229
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .230
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............230
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............232
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .232
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........233
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........243
▫ Acceleration .........................243
▫ Traction ............................243
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............244
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................244
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................244
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................246
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............247
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................248
5
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................250
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .250
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .250
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............252
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............253
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........254
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............257
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................258
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............260
▫ Tire Markings ........................260
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........264
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........266
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........267
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........272
▫ Tire Pressure ........................272
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................273
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .275
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................275
▫ Tire Types ...........................276
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............277
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............278
▫ Tire Spinning ........................282
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................282
▫ Life Of Tire .........................283
▫ Replacement Tires .....................284
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......285
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....287
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................288
▫ Base System .........................290
▫ General Information ...................292
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................293
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................293
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................293
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............294
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......294
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................295
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................295
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................296
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............297
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................298
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............298
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............299
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................300
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............300
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................303
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............303
▫ Towing Tips .........................314
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............316
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .316
▫ Recreational Towing — Automatic
Transmission .........................317
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
(Continued)
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not),
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE:
Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent the
transmission gear selector from being moved out of the
PARK position. To shift the transmission out of the PARK
position the first time after cranking is allowed, ensure
swivel seats are locked in the forward facing position.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the
ERS shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside
the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents
automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, tog-
gling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will
change the highest available gear.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running.
Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the
key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selec-
tor all the way forward and to the left until it stops and
is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With the brake pedal released, verify the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), select Tow/Haul mode or
use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer
to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will
shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Moving the gear
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
selector to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate
ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Instrument
Cluster
Display
123456D
Actual
Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
the ERS position, then tap it forward (-) repeatedly as the
vehicle slows. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
•
The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine
is started.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm,
will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift
into and out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located on the outboard side of
the drivers seat. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the release button
with your thumb, then lower the lever completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear. Failure to do
so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage
or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
vers.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-
lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing.
(Continued)
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC
equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most driving situations. ESC should only be
turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the “ESC
Off” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manage-
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
•
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the ⴖESC Off
Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated. When in ⴖPartial
Offⴖ mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pushing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec-
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare
tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
• Install on Front Tires Only
• Tire chains for a 225/75R16 tire with a Quality Chain
Corp Light Truck Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire
chain or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated,
and the “Check tire pressure” text message will display
when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are
low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and
inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message
will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size
spare wheel.
1. The spare tire has a tire pressure monitoring sensor,
but it is not monitored until it is mounted in place of
any of the existing four road tires.
2. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn ON due to the low tire condition. Then, after
driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15mph
(24km/h), the system will recognize the new sensor, so
turn off the telltale.
3. If a spare tire not equipped with tire pressure moni-
toring sensor is used, then the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn ON, flashing for 75 seconds
and then remaining solid for each subsequent ignition
key cycle.
NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each
tire substitution.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide op-
timum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydrau-
lic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have a collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select [ERS] shift control).
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over-
heating, activate the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driv-
ing in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more
severe grades.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws.
Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with diesel engine and
electric park brake, see important information in the
Diesel Supplement.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........321
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............321
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................322
▫ Torque Specifications ...................322
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........324
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................324
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .325
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........326
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........329
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........334
▫ Jack And Tools Location .................335
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................338
▫ Preparations .........................342
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................343
▫ Wheel Covers ........................352
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........353
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............353
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................355
▫ Battery Location ......................358
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
145 Ft-Lbs (197 N·m) M16 x 1.50 21 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 —
Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1.
Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3.
Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack And Tools Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Jack Kit Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
To release the jack kit for it’s storage location, you must
push down and turn the lock knob 1/4 turn counter
clockwise to the unlock position.
CAUTION!
Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to lock
knob may occur.
Lock Knob
1 — Unlock Position
2 — Lock Position
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To open the jack kit container you must push the con-
tainers release to separate the top and bottom.
Container Release
Jacking Tools
1 — Wrench Handle
2—TowEye
3 — Lug Bolt Adaptor
4 — Jack
5 — Tool Handle
6 — Reversible Tool
7 — Winch Extension
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the lug bolt adapter to the winch
extension and insert it into the winch mechanism.
The winch mechanism is located under the rear of the
vehicle to the right of the spare tire.
Jack Tools
1 — Winch Extension
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Wrench Handle
Winch Location
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the winch extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
Winch Extension
Lowering Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
Spare Tire
Retainer Nut
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Lifting Spare Tire
Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
Assembled Jack
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
NOTE: The rear jacking location is located in front of the
rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
Jacking Engagement Locations
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
NOTE: The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door.
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter on the
jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged in the described location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Front Jacking Location
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
10. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with the cable
and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle.
11. Install the winch extension and rotate the wrench
handle clockwise until the winch mechanism indi-
cation window turns yellow and the operator hears
“3 clicks” from the device to show the wheel is
properly stowed under the vehicle.
Winch Mechanism Properly Engaged (Yellow DOT Will
Appear In The Winch Indication Window)
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
In the case that the yellow dot does not appear in the
winch mechanism window refer to step 11 above, the
operator should repeat the spare tire installation
procedure. If the yellow dot does not appear in the
winch indication window, place and secure the dam-
aged wheel into the vehicle and seek dealer assis-
tance to the winch mechanism.
Winch Mechanism NOT Properly Engaged
(Black Window Will Appear)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the storage compartment.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
13. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
1. Remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage
bag in the glove compartment.
2. Take the retainer and position it inside the circular
bracket.
Adapter/Bracket Union
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Tighten the knob on the bolt to secure it to the bracket.
Securing The Bracket
Alloy Wheel Mounting
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
4. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted
adapter on the inner part of the rim. Using the
supplied bolts, fasten the wheel to the adapter using
the bolt install wrench. Tighten the bolts with the
wrench extension and wrench handle.
5. Follow the steps above for proper spare tire stowage.
Wheel Covers
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub
cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place by the
wheel lug bolts and can be removed after the wheel lug
bolts are taken off.
Wheel/Bolts Attaching To Mounting Bracket
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are located
under the hood, in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side.
The Remote Positive (+) Post is covered with a protective
cap located on the side of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
The Remote Negative (-) Post is located on the core
support closest to the front of the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Jump Starting Remote Post Locations
A — Remote Positive (+) Post
B — Remote Negative (-) Post
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: The remote positive (+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side under the cover
of the Front Power Distribution Center.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE: The remote negative (-) post is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, disconnect the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive end (+) of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution Cen-
ter.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
Battery Location
There are two remote jump starting posts under the hood
which is the recommended jump start location. If access
to the battery is needed, an access panel on the driver’s
side floor will allow for battery access.
Access Panel
Battery Location
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE , while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Vehicles with diesel engine (automated manual
transmission) cannot be rocked in this manner, because
the transmission will not allow shifts between forward
and REVERSE gears while the wheels are turning.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover which is located
below the gear selector.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
the Ground
ALL Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with diesel engine and
electric park brake, see important information in the
Diesel Supplement.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the automatic trans-
mission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with front
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the front wheels OFF the ground
(using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift equipment with the
front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........367
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .368
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................368
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............369
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................370
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................371
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................372
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........372
▫ Engine Oil ..........................373
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................376
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................376
▫ Exhaust System ......................377
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............379
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............380
▫ Body Lubrication .....................383
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............384
▫ Cooling System ......................385
▫ Brake System ........................391
▫ Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Gasoline Engine Only) ..............393
7
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ......................395
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .402
䡵 FUSES ..............................403
▫ Underhood Fuses......................404
▫ Interior Fuses ........................410
▫ Right Central Pillar Fuses ................414
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................415
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................416
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................418
▫ Headlamps Low Beam And High beam .....418
▫ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps .........419
▫ Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/
Front Side Marker Lamp ................420
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................421
▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps .................421
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And
Rear Side Marker Lamps ................421
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................422
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS ......................423
▫ Engine .............................423
▫ Chassis ............................425
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Washer Solvent Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Coolant Reservoir
7 — Power Steering Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the
MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact your authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in the
engine compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter retainer to
the fresh air inlet, and remove the filter retainer.
Accessing Air Filter
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the A/C air filter from the filter
retainer.
3. Install the A/C air filter/filter retainer back into the
fresh air inlet. When installing the filter retainer make
sure the retainer is fully engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly to secure
the filter retainer to the fresh air inlet.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function.
Removing Air Filer
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — A/C Air Filter
3 — A/C Air Filter Retainer
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment
and should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MIN” and “MAX” marks.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Gasoline Engine Only)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. To access the
fuses, remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 40 Amp Orange – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02 20 Amp Yellow
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
– Starter Relay 3.6L (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F02 50 Amp Red
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
– Glow Plug Unit (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F04 50 Amp Red
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
– Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC) (Trans
Power Relay, Vacuum Pump, KL30 for the Shifter
Transmission Module [STM]) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F04 40 Amp Orange
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
– Fuel Filter Heater (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F05 30 Amp Green – SELESPEED Pump RELE (3.0 Diesel Engine) -
If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Orange
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F07 50 Amp Red
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pressure Regulator (MPROP)-DRV
(3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6),
KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL15
Gear Selector Unit, KL15 Engine Control Module
(ECM), KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel Engine)
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Injectors
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Secondary Loads, Engine Control Module (ECM)
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM),
KL30 Main Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM),
KL30 Main Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor (If Equipped)
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition Coils
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Primary Loads
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum pump relay coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
— If Equipped
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the front PDC
Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F61 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump (3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE (3.6 Gasoline Engine) —
If Equipped
F64 7.5 Amp Brown Urea Pump (3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F65 25 Amp White Urea NOX Sensor 1–2 — PM Sensor
(3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F66 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM)
(3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F12 10 Amp Red Right Low Beam
F13 10 Amp Red Left Low Beam
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F32 10 Amp Red SBMT
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM – TPCU – RRM – DLC)
F37 5 Amp Beige INT (BRAKE NO – IPC)
F38 15 Amp Blue Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM – SAS – BRAKE NC)
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (PAM – CCS – RRM – ECM)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 5 Amp Beige INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX)
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC)
F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Lamp
F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Lamp
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the
interior side at the base of the passenger side B pillar.
Fuse Panel Location
Fuse Panel
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) – If Equipped
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) – If Equipped
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7LL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps WY5W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
•
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
•
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High beam
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 12.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler
panel.
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp hous-
ing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back of the
headlamp housing.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the socket.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
9. Pull bulb outward from socket.
10. Install new bulb.
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks back into
place.
12. Install access cap.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
14. Install one upper screw on the headlamp housing.
15. Install two lower screws on the headlamp housing.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
16. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
17. Carefully reinstall two screws on the upper head-
lamp filler panel.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 7.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler
panel.
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp hous-
ing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
9. Install the one upper screw on headlamp housing.
10. Install the two lower screws on headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
12. Carefully reinstall two screws the on upper head-
lamp filler panel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side Marker
Lamp
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 8.
1. Remove one screw on the lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove two screws on the upper headlamp filler
panel.
3. Remove one upper screw from the headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower screws from the headlamp hous-
ing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove the DRL, side marker bulb by pulling straight
out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
10. Install the one upper screw on the headlamp hous-
ing.
11. Install the two lower screws on the headlamp hous-
ing.
12. Carefully reinstall one screw on the lower headlamp
filler panel.
13. Carefully reinstall two screws on the upper head-
lamp filler panel.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in wheel
liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket clockwise
into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And Rear
Side Marker Lamps
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp.
3. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and rear
side marker bulb/socket by rotating counter-
clockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
5. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
6. Reinstall lamp.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission –
3.6L Gasoline Engine Only
Use Only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard
MS-11655.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated
predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
XXX X X X X
430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace Brake Fluid every two
years. *
XXX X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................435
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............435
▫ Prepare A List ........................435
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............435
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............436
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........437
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........437
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................437
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........437
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............437
▫ Service Contract ......................438
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............439
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................439
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............440
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................440
▫ In Canada...........................440
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............440
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............387
Adding Fuel .............................298
Adding Washer Fluid ......................384
Additives, Fuel ...........................295
AirBag.................................44
Air Bag Operation .......................46
If A Deployment Occurs ...................52
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............56
Transporting Pets ........................67
Air Bag Light .........................71, 142
Air Bag Maintenance .......................56
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .376
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................380
Air Conditioning..........................212
Air Conditioning Controls ...................212
Air Conditioning Filter .....................382
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............380, 381
Air Conditioning System.................212, 380
Air Pressure, Tires.........................273
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................16
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................16
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............386, 422
Disposal ..............................389
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................250
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................162
Appearance Care .........................395
Ashtray ................................129
Assist, Hill Start ..........................258
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................206
Auto Down Power Windows ..................24
Automatic Door Locks ......................23
Automatic Transaxle ........................12
Automatic Transmission .................230, 394
Adding Fluid ..........................394
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................394
Fluid Change ..........................394
Fluid Level Check .......................394
446 INDEX
Fluid Type .........................393, 425
Gear Ranges ...........................234
Special Additives .......................393
Battery .............................143, 379
Charging System Light ...................143
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...............19
Belts, Seat ...............................70
Body Builders Guide ........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................383
B-Pillar Location ..........................267
Brake Assist System .......................253
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............250
Brake Fluid .............................425
Brake, Parking ...........................248
Brake System .........................250, 391
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................250
Fluid Check ...........................391
Parking ..............................248
Warning Light .........................149
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................232
Bulb Replacement......................416, 418
Bulbs, Light...........................73, 416
Camera, Rear ............................119
Capacities, Fluid ..........................422
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................298
Power Steering .........................247
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................388
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................69, 297
Cargo Light .............................105
Car Washes .............................395
Cellular Phone ...........................211
Certification Label.........................300
Chains, Tire .............................285
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................262
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .370
10
INDEX 447
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............68
Checks, Safety ............................68
Child Restraint ............................58
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................63
Child Restraints .........................58
Infants And Child Restraints ................61
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........61
Cigar Lighter ............................129
Clean Air Gasoline ........................293
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................397
Climate Control ..........................212
Manual ..............................212
Cold Weather Operation ....................229
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............210
Compact Spare Tire ........................279
Console, Overhead ........................122
Contract, Service ..........................438
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........388
Cooling System...........................385
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............387
Coolant Capacity .......................422
Coolant Level ......................386, 389
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................389
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................386
Inspection ............................389
Points To Remember .....................390
Pressure Cap ..........................388
Radiator Cap ..........................388
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......386, 422, 423
Corrosion Protection .......................395
Cruise Light .............................166
Cupholders ..........................129, 402
Customer Assistance .......................436
Customer Programmable Features .............197
Dealer Service............................372
448 INDEX
Defroster, Windshield ................71, 214, 215
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................368
Dimmer Control ..........................100
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................102
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................394
Oil (Engine) ...........................373
Power Steering .........................247
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................362
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................389
Door Ajar...............................144
Door Ajar Light ..........................144
Door Locks ..............................21
Door Locks, Automatic ......................23
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................244
Electric Remote Mirrors......................79
Electronic Brake Control System ...............250
Brake Assist System .....................253
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........109
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............254
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........145
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Exit Trip ..............................173
NewTrip.............................172
Start Of Trip Procedure ...................173
Trip Computer .........................172
Trip Functions .........................173
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................359
Jump Starting ..........................353
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........370
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................376
Block Heater ..........................230
10
INDEX 449
Break-In Recommendations .................68
Checking Oil Level ......................373
Compartment ..........................367
Compartment Identification ................367
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................386, 423
Cooling ..............................385
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................69, 297
Fails To Start ..........................229
Flooded, Starting .......................229
Fuel Requirements ...................293, 422
Jump Starting ..........................353
Oil...........................373, 422, 423
Oil Filter .............................376
Oil Selection .......................374, 422
Oil Synthetic ..........................375
Overheating ...........................321
Starting ..............................228
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................375
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................375
Entry System, Illuminated ....................17
Ethanol ................................294
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................69, 297
Exhaust System ........................69, 377
Exterior Lighting ..........................99
Exterior Lights ............................73
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................376
Air Conditioning .......................382
Engine Oil .........................376, 423
Engine Oil Disposal .....................376
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................321
Turn Signal .........................73, 164
Flooded Engine Starting ....................229
Fluid Capacities ..........................422
Fluid Leaks ..............................73
450 INDEX
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................394
Brake ................................391
Cooling System .........................386
Power Steering .........................247
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........423
Fog Lights ..............................101
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................321
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................359
Fuel...................................293
Adding ..............................298
Additives .............................295
Clean Air .............................293
Ethanol ..............................294
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................298
Gasoline ..............................293
Materials Added ........................295
Methanol .............................294
Octane Rating ......................293, 423
Requirements .......................293, 422
Tank Capacity ..........................422
Fueling ................................298
Fuses ..................................403
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............298, 299, 369
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................293
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................293
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................293
Gear Ranges .............................234
Gear Select Lever Override ..................361
General Information ....................211,292
Glass Cleaning ...........................401
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................300, 303
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............300, 303
Guide, Body Builders ........................6
GVWR .................................300
10
INDEX 451
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................244
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................321
Headlights
Cleaning .............................400
High Beam ............................102
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........102
Passing ..............................102
Switch ................................99
Head Restraints ...........................94
Heated Mirrors............................80
Heated Seats .............................93
Heater .................................212
Heater, Engine Block .......................230
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .102
Hill Start Assist...........................258
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................306
Hood Release .............................97
Ignition .................................12
Key ...............................11,12
Ignition Key Removal .......................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................14
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................78
Instrument Cluster .....................137, 164
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............136
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............401
Interior Appearance Care....................399
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............107
Introduction ..............................4
Jump Starting ............................353
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ....19
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
452 INDEX
Key, Replacement ..........................15
Keys ...................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................14
Lane Change Assist........................102
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................29
Latches .................................73
Lead Free Gasoline ........................293
Leaks, Fluid ..............................73
Life Of Tires .............................283
Light Bulbs ...........................73, 416
Lights................................73, 99
AirBag............................71, 142
Brake Assist Warning ....................256
Brake Warning .........................149
Bulb Replacement .......................418
Cruise ...............................166
Daytime Running .......................100
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..............99, 102
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....256
Exterior ...............................73
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................321
Headlights .............................99
High Beam ............................102
Illuminated Entry ........................17
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........159
Park .............................101, 165
Passing ..............................102
Seat Belt Reminder ......................141
Service ...............................418
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............155
Traction Control ........................256
Turn Signal ......................73, 99, 164
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......164
Loading Vehicle .......................300, 302
Capacities ............................302
Tires ................................267
10
INDEX 453
Locks
Automatic Door .........................23
Door .................................21
Lubrication, Body .........................383
Lug Nuts ...............................322
Maintenance Free Battery....................379
Maintenance Procedures ....................372
Maintenance Schedule ......................428
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .159, 370
Manual, Service ..........................440
Methanol ...............................294
Mirrors .................................78
Electric Remote .........................79
Exterior Folding .........................79
Heated ...............................80
Outside ...............................78
Rearview ..............................78
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................288
MOPAR Parts.........................371, 439
MTBE/ETBE ............................294
Multi-Function Control Lever .................99
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................68
Occupant Restraints ........................25
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................293
Oil Change Indicator .......................171
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................171
Oil, Engine ..........................373, 423
Capacity .............................422
Change Interval ........................374
Checking .............................373
Disposal ..............................376
Filter .............................376, 423
Filter Disposal .........................376
Identification Logo ......................374
454 INDEX
Materials Added To ......................375
Pressure Warning Light ...................151
Recommendation ....................374, 422
Synthetic .............................375
Viscosity ..........................375, 422
Oil Filter, Change .........................376
Oil Filter, Selection ........................376
Oil Pressure Light .........................151
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................368
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................78
Overhead Console.........................122
Overheating, Engine .......................321
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,440
Paint Care ..............................395
Parking Brake............................248
ParkSense System, Rear .....................114
Passing Light ............................102
Personal Settings..........................197
Pets....................................67
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........268
Power
Mirrors ...............................79
Steering ...........................246, 247
Windows ..............................23
Power Steering Fluid.......................425
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............37
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................38
Radial Ply Tires ..........................275
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........388
Radio Frequency
General Information ...................15, 20
Radio Operation ..........................211
Rear Camera.............................119
Rear ParkSense System .....................114
10
INDEX 455
Rearview Mirrors ..........................78
Recreational Towing .......................316
Reformulated Gasoline .....................293
Refrigerant ..............................381
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................27
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........209
Replacement Bulbs ........................416
Replacement Keys .........................15
Replacement Parts.........................371
Replacement Tires .........................284
Reporting Safety Defects ....................440
Restraint, Head ...........................94
Restraints, Child...........................58
Rotation, Tires ...........................287
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................70
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................73
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................440
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................69
Safety Information, Tire .....................260
Safety Tips ...............................68
Schedule, Maintenance .....................428
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......35
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........38
Energy Management Feature ................38
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................32
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................29
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............34
Pregnant Women ........................37
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................38
Seat Belt Reminder .......................27
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................401
Seat Belt Reminder .........................27
Seat Belts .............................27, 70
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................35
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........35
Child Restraint ..........................58
456 INDEX
Front Seat ........................27, 29, 32
Inspection .............................70
Operating Instructions ....................32
Pregnant Women ........................37
Pretensioners ...........................38
Rear Seat ..............................29
Reminder .............................141
Untwisting Procedure .....................34
Seats ...................................83
Adjustment ............................83
Heated ...............................93
Security Alarm ............................16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............423
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................14
Service Assistance......................435, 436
Service Contract ..........................438
Service Manuals ..........................440
Shift Lever Override .......................361
Shoulder Belts ............................29
Signals, Turn ..........................73, 164
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................285
Snow Tires ..............................277
Spare Tire.....................278, 279, 280, 281
Spark Plugs .............................423
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................113
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................109
Starting ................................228
Automatic Transmission ..................228
Cold Weather ..........................229
Engine Fails To Start .....................229
Steering
Column Lock ..........................108
Power ............................246, 247
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............209
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .209
Storage ................................415
Storage, Vehicle...........................415
10
INDEX 457
Storing Your Vehicle .......................415
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........44
Sway Control, Trailer.......................257
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................375
Telescoping Steering Column .................108
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......267, 268
Tire Markings ............................260
Tires.........................73, 272, 278, 442
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................283
Air Pressure ...........................272
Chains ...............................285
Compact Spare .........................279
General Information ..................272, 278
High Speed ...........................275
Inflation Pressures .......................273
Life Of Tires ...........................283
Load Capacity ......................267, 268
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............288
Pressure Warning Light ...................155
Quality Grading ........................442
Radial ...............................275
Replacement ...........................284
Rotation ..............................287
Safety ............................260, 272
Sizes ................................262
Snow Tires ............................277
Spare Tire ......................278, 280, 281
Spinning .............................282
Trailer Towing .........................310
Tread Wear Indicators ....................282
Tire Safety Information .....................260
Tire Service Kit .......324, 325, 326, 329, 330, 332, 334
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................307
Torque Converter Clutch ....................242
Towing .............................303,
362
Disabled Vehicle ........................362
Guide ...............................307
458 INDEX
Recreational ...........................316
Weight ...............................307
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........316
Traction ................................243
Traction Control ..........................252
Traction Control Switch .....................252
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................257
Trailer Towing ...........................303
Cooling System Tips .....................315
Hitches ..............................306
Minimum Requirements ..................308
Tips.................................314
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................307
Wiring ...............................312
Trailer Towing Guide.......................307
Trailer Weight............................307
Transaxle
Automatic .............................12
Transmission
Automatic ............................230
Fluid .............................393, 425
Transporting Pets ..........................67
Tread Wear Indicators ......................282
Turn Signals .............................164
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................442
Unleaded Gasoline ........................293
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................34
Vehicle Certification Label ...................300
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ....................268, 300, 302
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Storage ...........................415
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................375
10
INDEX 459
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................439
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................384
Washing Vehicle ..........................395
Water
Driving Through ........................244
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................397
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................397
Wind Buffeting............................25
Windows ................................23
Power ................................23
Windshield Defroster .................71, 214, 215
Windshield Washers ....................106, 384
Fluid ................................106
Windshield Wiper Blades....................384
Windshield Wipers ........................106
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................384
Wipers, Intermittent .......................107
460 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 promaster
sixth edition
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
16VF-126-AF
